<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="fr">
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Matthieu+Solignac</id>
		<title>LaTeX - Contributions de l’utilisateur [fr]</title>
		<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Matthieu+Solignac"/>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/wiki/Sp%C3%A9cial:Contributions/Matthieu_Solignac"/>
		<updated>2026-04-18T05:44:42Z</updated>
		<subtitle>Contributions de l’utilisateur</subtitle>
		<generator>MediaWiki 1.24.0</generator>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Bibliography_Management&amp;diff=379</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Bibliography Management</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Bibliography_Management&amp;diff=379"/>
				<updated>2011-06-01T08:25:28Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : bottom page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embedded system ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are writing only one or two documents and aren't planning on writing more on the same subject for a long time, maybe you don't want to waste time creating a database of references you are never going to use. In this case you should consider using the basic and simple bibliography support that is embedded within LaTeX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LaTeX provides an environment called &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; that you have to use where you want the bibliography; that usually means at the very end of your document, just before the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\end{document}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. Here is a practical example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The \LaTeX system~\cite{lamport94} is set of macros for the \TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{9}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem{lamport94}&lt;br /&gt;
  Leslie Lamport,&lt;br /&gt;
  \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.&lt;br /&gt;
  Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,&lt;br /&gt;
  2nd Edition,&lt;br /&gt;
  1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will be displayed with numbered references:&lt;br /&gt;
The LaTeX system [1] is set of macros for the TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The \LaTeX system~\cite{lamport94} is a set of macros for the \TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{9}&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem[(Lamport 1994)]{lamport94}&lt;br /&gt;
  Leslie Lamport,&lt;br /&gt;
  \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.&lt;br /&gt;
  Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,&lt;br /&gt;
  2nd Edition,&lt;br /&gt;
  1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will be displayed using the optional argument of the bibitem action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OK, so what is going on here? The first thing to notice is the establishment of the environment. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a keyword that LaTeX recognizes as everything between the begin and end tags as being data for the bibliography. The optional argument, which I supplied after the begin statement, is telling LaTeX how wide the item label will be when printed. Note however, that it is not a literal parameter, i.e the number 9 in this case, but a text width. Therefore, I am effectively telling LaTeX that I will only need reference labels of one character in width, which means no more than nine references in total. If you want more than ten, then input a two-digit number, such as '99' which permits fewer than 100 references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next is the actual reference entry itself. This is prefixed with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem{''cite_key''}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The ''cite_key'' should be a unique identifier for that particular reference, and is often some sort of mnemonic consisting of any sequence of letters, numbers and punctuation symbols (although not a comma). I often use the surname of the first author, followed by the last two digits of the year (hence ''lamport94''). If that author has produced more than one reference for a given year, then I add letters after, 'a', 'b', etc. But, you should do whatever works for you. Everything after the key is the reference itself. You need to type it as you want it to be presented. I have put the different parts of the reference, such as author, title, etc., on different lines for readability. These linebreaks are ignored by LaTeX. I wanted the title to be in italics, so I used the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\emph{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command to achieve this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Citations ==&lt;br /&gt;
To actually cite a given document is very easy. Go to the point where you want the citation to appear, and use the following: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{''cite_key''}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, where the ''cite_key'' is that of the bibitem you wish to cite. When LaTeX processes the document, the citation will be cross-referenced with the bibitems and replaced with the appropriate number citation. The advantage here, once again, is that LaTeX looks after the numbering for you. If it were totally manual, then adding or removing a reference would be a real chore, as you would have to re-number all the citations by hand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of WYSIWYG editors, typesetting systems like \TeX{} or \LaTeX{} \cite{lamport94} can be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Referring More Specific ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you want to refer to a certain page, figure or theorem in a text book. For that you can use the arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cite[p.~215]{citation01}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The argument, &amp;quot;p. 215&amp;quot;, will show up inside the same brackets. Note the tilde in [p.~215], which replaces the end-of-sentence spacing with a non-breakable inter-word space. There are two reasons: end-of-sentence spacing is too wide, and &amp;quot;p.&amp;quot; should not be separated from the page number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multiple Citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a sequence of multiple citations are needed, you should use a single &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The citations are then separated by commas. Note that you must not use spaces between the citations. Here's an example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cite{citation01,citation02,citation03}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result will then be shown as citations inside the same brackets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No Cite ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you only want a reference to appear in the bibliography, but not where it is referenced in the main text, then the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nocite{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can be used, for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lamport showed in 1995 something...  \nocite{lamport95}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A special version of the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nocite{*}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, includes all entries from the database, whether they are referenced in the document or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== BiBTeX styles for reviews ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Economic reviews ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can access to some bibliographic styles specific to economic reviews at the URL&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/economic&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The README file should be read first. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the springer journals, you can access to the ''Instruction for authors'' at the following URL:&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.springer.com/cda/content/document/cda_downloaddocument/LaTeX.zip?SGWID=0-0-45-468198-0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using a specific BiBTeX file to create a bibliography ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Create a BiBTeX file ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put all your references into a separate file. Save it in .bib (as &amp;quot;mybiblio.bib&amp;quot; ) in the same folder than your main LaTeX file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
@article{Vikat2007,&lt;br /&gt;
	Author = {Solaz, A.},&lt;br /&gt;
	Doi = {10.4054/DemRes.2007.17.14},&lt;br /&gt;
	Journal = {Demographic Research},&lt;br /&gt;
	Number = {14},&lt;br /&gt;
	Pages = {389-440},&lt;br /&gt;
	Title = {Generation and Gender Survey (GGS): Towards a better understanding of relationships and processes in the life course},&lt;br /&gt;
	Volume = {17},&lt;br /&gt;
	Year = {2007},&lt;br /&gt;
	Bdsk-Url-1 = {http://dx.doi.org/10.4054/DemRes.2007.17.14}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
@article{Régnier-Loilier2006,&lt;br /&gt;
author = {Régnier-Loilier, A.},&lt;br /&gt;
title= {How often do adult children see their parents?},&lt;br /&gt;
year = {2006},&lt;br /&gt;
URL = {http://www.ined.fr/fichier/t_publication/1211/publi_pdf2_pop.and.soc.english.427.pdf},&lt;br /&gt;
journal = {Population &amp;amp; Societies},&lt;br /&gt;
volume = {427},&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Insert your BiBTeX file into your main file ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to insert into your main LaTeX:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliography{mybiblio}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose a specific style:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliographystyle{econometrica-fr}&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliography{mybiblio}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Presentations|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Bibliography_Management&amp;diff=377</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Bibliography Management</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Bibliography_Management&amp;diff=377"/>
				<updated>2011-06-01T08:24:23Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* BiBTeX styles for reviews */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embedded system ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are writing only one or two documents and aren't planning on writing more on the same subject for a long time, maybe you don't want to waste time creating a database of references you are never going to use. In this case you should consider using the basic and simple bibliography support that is embedded within LaTeX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LaTeX provides an environment called &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; that you have to use where you want the bibliography; that usually means at the very end of your document, just before the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\end{document}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. Here is a practical example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The \LaTeX system~\cite{lamport94} is set of macros for the \TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{9}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem{lamport94}&lt;br /&gt;
  Leslie Lamport,&lt;br /&gt;
  \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.&lt;br /&gt;
  Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,&lt;br /&gt;
  2nd Edition,&lt;br /&gt;
  1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will be displayed with numbered references:&lt;br /&gt;
The LaTeX system [1] is set of macros for the TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The \LaTeX system~\cite{lamport94} is a set of macros for the \TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{9}&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem[(Lamport 1994)]{lamport94}&lt;br /&gt;
  Leslie Lamport,&lt;br /&gt;
  \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.&lt;br /&gt;
  Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,&lt;br /&gt;
  2nd Edition,&lt;br /&gt;
  1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will be displayed using the optional argument of the bibitem action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OK, so what is going on here? The first thing to notice is the establishment of the environment. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a keyword that LaTeX recognizes as everything between the begin and end tags as being data for the bibliography. The optional argument, which I supplied after the begin statement, is telling LaTeX how wide the item label will be when printed. Note however, that it is not a literal parameter, i.e the number 9 in this case, but a text width. Therefore, I am effectively telling LaTeX that I will only need reference labels of one character in width, which means no more than nine references in total. If you want more than ten, then input a two-digit number, such as '99' which permits fewer than 100 references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next is the actual reference entry itself. This is prefixed with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem{''cite_key''}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The ''cite_key'' should be a unique identifier for that particular reference, and is often some sort of mnemonic consisting of any sequence of letters, numbers and punctuation symbols (although not a comma). I often use the surname of the first author, followed by the last two digits of the year (hence ''lamport94''). If that author has produced more than one reference for a given year, then I add letters after, 'a', 'b', etc. But, you should do whatever works for you. Everything after the key is the reference itself. You need to type it as you want it to be presented. I have put the different parts of the reference, such as author, title, etc., on different lines for readability. These linebreaks are ignored by LaTeX. I wanted the title to be in italics, so I used the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\emph{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command to achieve this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Citations ==&lt;br /&gt;
To actually cite a given document is very easy. Go to the point where you want the citation to appear, and use the following: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{''cite_key''}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, where the ''cite_key'' is that of the bibitem you wish to cite. When LaTeX processes the document, the citation will be cross-referenced with the bibitems and replaced with the appropriate number citation. The advantage here, once again, is that LaTeX looks after the numbering for you. If it were totally manual, then adding or removing a reference would be a real chore, as you would have to re-number all the citations by hand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of WYSIWYG editors, typesetting systems like \TeX{} or \LaTeX{} \cite{lamport94} can be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Referring More Specific ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you want to refer to a certain page, figure or theorem in a text book. For that you can use the arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cite[p.~215]{citation01}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The argument, &amp;quot;p. 215&amp;quot;, will show up inside the same brackets. Note the tilde in [p.~215], which replaces the end-of-sentence spacing with a non-breakable inter-word space. There are two reasons: end-of-sentence spacing is too wide, and &amp;quot;p.&amp;quot; should not be separated from the page number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multiple Citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a sequence of multiple citations are needed, you should use a single &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The citations are then separated by commas. Note that you must not use spaces between the citations. Here's an example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cite{citation01,citation02,citation03}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result will then be shown as citations inside the same brackets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No Cite ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you only want a reference to appear in the bibliography, but not where it is referenced in the main text, then the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nocite{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can be used, for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lamport showed in 1995 something...  \nocite{lamport95}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A special version of the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nocite{*}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, includes all entries from the database, whether they are referenced in the document or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== BiBTeX styles for reviews ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Economic reviews ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can access to some bibliographic styles specific to economic reviews at the URL&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/economic&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The README file should be read first. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the springer journals, you can access to the ''Instruction for authors'' at the following URL:&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.springer.com/cda/content/document/cda_downloaddocument/LaTeX.zip?SGWID=0-0-45-468198-0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Presentations|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using a specific BiBTeX file to create a bibliography ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Create a BiBTeX file ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put all your references into a separate file. Save it in .bib (as &amp;quot;mybiblio.bib&amp;quot; ) in the same folder than your main LaTeX file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
@article{Vikat2007,&lt;br /&gt;
	Author = {Solaz, A.},&lt;br /&gt;
	Doi = {10.4054/DemRes.2007.17.14},&lt;br /&gt;
	Journal = {Demographic Research},&lt;br /&gt;
	Number = {14},&lt;br /&gt;
	Pages = {389-440},&lt;br /&gt;
	Title = {Generation and Gender Survey (GGS): Towards a better understanding of relationships and processes in the life course},&lt;br /&gt;
	Volume = {17},&lt;br /&gt;
	Year = {2007},&lt;br /&gt;
	Bdsk-Url-1 = {http://dx.doi.org/10.4054/DemRes.2007.17.14}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
@article{Régnier-Loilier2006,&lt;br /&gt;
author = {Régnier-Loilier, A.},&lt;br /&gt;
title= {How often do adult children see their parents?},&lt;br /&gt;
year = {2006},&lt;br /&gt;
URL = {http://www.ined.fr/fichier/t_publication/1211/publi_pdf2_pop.and.soc.english.427.pdf},&lt;br /&gt;
journal = {Population &amp;amp; Societies},&lt;br /&gt;
volume = {427},&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Insert your BiBTeX file into your main file ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to insert into your main LaTeX:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliography{mybiblio}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose a specific style:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliographystyle{econometrica-fr}&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliography{mybiblio}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Bibliography_Management&amp;diff=371</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Bibliography Management</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Bibliography_Management&amp;diff=371"/>
				<updated>2011-06-01T08:22:19Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Using BiBTeX to create a bibliography */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embedded system ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are writing only one or two documents and aren't planning on writing more on the same subject for a long time, maybe you don't want to waste time creating a database of references you are never going to use. In this case you should consider using the basic and simple bibliography support that is embedded within LaTeX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LaTeX provides an environment called &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; that you have to use where you want the bibliography; that usually means at the very end of your document, just before the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\end{document}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. Here is a practical example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The \LaTeX system~\cite{lamport94} is set of macros for the \TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{9}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem{lamport94}&lt;br /&gt;
  Leslie Lamport,&lt;br /&gt;
  \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.&lt;br /&gt;
  Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,&lt;br /&gt;
  2nd Edition,&lt;br /&gt;
  1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will be displayed with numbered references:&lt;br /&gt;
The LaTeX system [1] is set of macros for the TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The \LaTeX system~\cite{lamport94} is a set of macros for the \TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{9}&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem[(Lamport 1994)]{lamport94}&lt;br /&gt;
  Leslie Lamport,&lt;br /&gt;
  \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.&lt;br /&gt;
  Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,&lt;br /&gt;
  2nd Edition,&lt;br /&gt;
  1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will be displayed using the optional argument of the bibitem action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OK, so what is going on here? The first thing to notice is the establishment of the environment. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a keyword that LaTeX recognizes as everything between the begin and end tags as being data for the bibliography. The optional argument, which I supplied after the begin statement, is telling LaTeX how wide the item label will be when printed. Note however, that it is not a literal parameter, i.e the number 9 in this case, but a text width. Therefore, I am effectively telling LaTeX that I will only need reference labels of one character in width, which means no more than nine references in total. If you want more than ten, then input a two-digit number, such as '99' which permits fewer than 100 references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next is the actual reference entry itself. This is prefixed with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem{''cite_key''}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The ''cite_key'' should be a unique identifier for that particular reference, and is often some sort of mnemonic consisting of any sequence of letters, numbers and punctuation symbols (although not a comma). I often use the surname of the first author, followed by the last two digits of the year (hence ''lamport94''). If that author has produced more than one reference for a given year, then I add letters after, 'a', 'b', etc. But, you should do whatever works for you. Everything after the key is the reference itself. You need to type it as you want it to be presented. I have put the different parts of the reference, such as author, title, etc., on different lines for readability. These linebreaks are ignored by LaTeX. I wanted the title to be in italics, so I used the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\emph{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command to achieve this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Citations ==&lt;br /&gt;
To actually cite a given document is very easy. Go to the point where you want the citation to appear, and use the following: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{''cite_key''}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, where the ''cite_key'' is that of the bibitem you wish to cite. When LaTeX processes the document, the citation will be cross-referenced with the bibitems and replaced with the appropriate number citation. The advantage here, once again, is that LaTeX looks after the numbering for you. If it were totally manual, then adding or removing a reference would be a real chore, as you would have to re-number all the citations by hand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of WYSIWYG editors, typesetting systems like \TeX{} or \LaTeX{} \cite{lamport94} can be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Referring More Specific ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you want to refer to a certain page, figure or theorem in a text book. For that you can use the arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cite[p.~215]{citation01}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The argument, &amp;quot;p. 215&amp;quot;, will show up inside the same brackets. Note the tilde in [p.~215], which replaces the end-of-sentence spacing with a non-breakable inter-word space. There are two reasons: end-of-sentence spacing is too wide, and &amp;quot;p.&amp;quot; should not be separated from the page number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multiple Citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a sequence of multiple citations are needed, you should use a single &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The citations are then separated by commas. Note that you must not use spaces between the citations. Here's an example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cite{citation01,citation02,citation03}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result will then be shown as citations inside the same brackets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No Cite ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you only want a reference to appear in the bibliography, but not where it is referenced in the main text, then the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nocite{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can be used, for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lamport showed in 1995 something...  \nocite{lamport95}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A special version of the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nocite{*}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, includes all entries from the database, whether they are referenced in the document or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== BiBTeX styles for reviews ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Economic reviews ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can access to some bibliographic styles specific to economic reviews at the URL&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/economic&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The README file should be read first. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the springer journals, you can access to the ''Instruction for authors'' at the following URL:&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.springer.com/cda/content/document/cda_downloaddocument/LaTeX.zip?SGWID=0-0-45-468198-0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Presentations|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using a specific BiBTeX file to create a bibliography ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put all your references into a separate file. Save it in .bib (as &amp;quot;mybiblio.bib&amp;quot; ) in the same folder than your main LaTeX file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
@article{Vikat2007,&lt;br /&gt;
	Author = {Solaz, A.},&lt;br /&gt;
	Doi = {10.4054/DemRes.2007.17.14},&lt;br /&gt;
	Journal = {Demographic Research},&lt;br /&gt;
	Number = {14},&lt;br /&gt;
	Pages = {389-440},&lt;br /&gt;
	Title = {Generation and Gender Survey (GGS): Towards a better understanding of relationships and processes in the life course},&lt;br /&gt;
	Volume = {17},&lt;br /&gt;
	Year = {2007},&lt;br /&gt;
	Bdsk-Url-1 = {http://dx.doi.org/10.4054/DemRes.2007.17.14}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
@article{Régnier-Loilier2006,&lt;br /&gt;
author = {Régnier-Loilier, A.},&lt;br /&gt;
title= {How often do adult children see their parents?},&lt;br /&gt;
year = {2006},&lt;br /&gt;
URL = {http://www.ined.fr/fichier/t_publication/1211/publi_pdf2_pop.and.soc.english.427.pdf},&lt;br /&gt;
journal = {Population &amp;amp; Societies},&lt;br /&gt;
volume = {427},&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Insert your BiBTeX file into your main file ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to insert into your main LaTeX:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliography{mybiblio}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose a specific style:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliographystyle{econometrica-fr}&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliography{mybiblio}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Bibliography_Management&amp;diff=362</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Bibliography Management</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Bibliography_Management&amp;diff=362"/>
				<updated>2011-06-01T08:20:43Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Insert your BiBTeX file into your main file */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embedded system ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are writing only one or two documents and aren't planning on writing more on the same subject for a long time, maybe you don't want to waste time creating a database of references you are never going to use. In this case you should consider using the basic and simple bibliography support that is embedded within LaTeX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LaTeX provides an environment called &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; that you have to use where you want the bibliography; that usually means at the very end of your document, just before the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\end{document}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. Here is a practical example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The \LaTeX system~\cite{lamport94} is set of macros for the \TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{9}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem{lamport94}&lt;br /&gt;
  Leslie Lamport,&lt;br /&gt;
  \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.&lt;br /&gt;
  Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,&lt;br /&gt;
  2nd Edition,&lt;br /&gt;
  1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will be displayed with numbered references:&lt;br /&gt;
The LaTeX system [1] is set of macros for the TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The \LaTeX system~\cite{lamport94} is a set of macros for the \TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{9}&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem[(Lamport 1994)]{lamport94}&lt;br /&gt;
  Leslie Lamport,&lt;br /&gt;
  \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.&lt;br /&gt;
  Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,&lt;br /&gt;
  2nd Edition,&lt;br /&gt;
  1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will be displayed using the optional argument of the bibitem action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OK, so what is going on here? The first thing to notice is the establishment of the environment. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a keyword that LaTeX recognizes as everything between the begin and end tags as being data for the bibliography. The optional argument, which I supplied after the begin statement, is telling LaTeX how wide the item label will be when printed. Note however, that it is not a literal parameter, i.e the number 9 in this case, but a text width. Therefore, I am effectively telling LaTeX that I will only need reference labels of one character in width, which means no more than nine references in total. If you want more than ten, then input a two-digit number, such as '99' which permits fewer than 100 references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next is the actual reference entry itself. This is prefixed with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem{''cite_key''}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The ''cite_key'' should be a unique identifier for that particular reference, and is often some sort of mnemonic consisting of any sequence of letters, numbers and punctuation symbols (although not a comma). I often use the surname of the first author, followed by the last two digits of the year (hence ''lamport94''). If that author has produced more than one reference for a given year, then I add letters after, 'a', 'b', etc. But, you should do whatever works for you. Everything after the key is the reference itself. You need to type it as you want it to be presented. I have put the different parts of the reference, such as author, title, etc., on different lines for readability. These linebreaks are ignored by LaTeX. I wanted the title to be in italics, so I used the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\emph{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command to achieve this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Citations ==&lt;br /&gt;
To actually cite a given document is very easy. Go to the point where you want the citation to appear, and use the following: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{''cite_key''}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, where the ''cite_key'' is that of the bibitem you wish to cite. When LaTeX processes the document, the citation will be cross-referenced with the bibitems and replaced with the appropriate number citation. The advantage here, once again, is that LaTeX looks after the numbering for you. If it were totally manual, then adding or removing a reference would be a real chore, as you would have to re-number all the citations by hand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of WYSIWYG editors, typesetting systems like \TeX{} or \LaTeX{} \cite{lamport94} can be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Referring More Specific ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you want to refer to a certain page, figure or theorem in a text book. For that you can use the arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cite[p.~215]{citation01}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The argument, &amp;quot;p. 215&amp;quot;, will show up inside the same brackets. Note the tilde in [p.~215], which replaces the end-of-sentence spacing with a non-breakable inter-word space. There are two reasons: end-of-sentence spacing is too wide, and &amp;quot;p.&amp;quot; should not be separated from the page number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multiple Citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a sequence of multiple citations are needed, you should use a single &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The citations are then separated by commas. Note that you must not use spaces between the citations. Here's an example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cite{citation01,citation02,citation03}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result will then be shown as citations inside the same brackets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No Cite ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you only want a reference to appear in the bibliography, but not where it is referenced in the main text, then the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nocite{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can be used, for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lamport showed in 1995 something...  \nocite{lamport95}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A special version of the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nocite{*}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, includes all entries from the database, whether they are referenced in the document or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== BiBTeX styles for reviews ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Economic reviews ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can access to some bibliographic styles specific to economic reviews at the URL&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/economic&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The README file should be read first. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the springer journals, you can access to the ''Instruction for authors'' at the following URL:&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.springer.com/cda/content/document/cda_downloaddocument/LaTeX.zip?SGWID=0-0-45-468198-0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Presentations|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using BiBTeX to create a bibliography ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put all your references into a separate file. Save it in .bib (as &amp;quot;mybiblio.bib&amp;quot; ) in the same folder than your main LaTeX file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
@article{Vikat2007,&lt;br /&gt;
	Author = {Solaz, A.},&lt;br /&gt;
	Doi = {10.4054/DemRes.2007.17.14},&lt;br /&gt;
	Journal = {Demographic Research},&lt;br /&gt;
	Number = {14},&lt;br /&gt;
	Pages = {389-440},&lt;br /&gt;
	Title = {Generation and Gender Survey (GGS): Towards a better understanding of relationships and processes in the life course},&lt;br /&gt;
	Volume = {17},&lt;br /&gt;
	Year = {2007},&lt;br /&gt;
	Bdsk-Url-1 = {http://dx.doi.org/10.4054/DemRes.2007.17.14}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
@article{Régnier-Loilier2006,&lt;br /&gt;
author = {Régnier-Loilier, A.},&lt;br /&gt;
title= {How often do adult children see their parents?},&lt;br /&gt;
year = {2006},&lt;br /&gt;
URL = {http://www.ined.fr/fichier/t_publication/1211/publi_pdf2_pop.and.soc.english.427.pdf},&lt;br /&gt;
journal = {Population &amp;amp; Societies},&lt;br /&gt;
volume = {427},&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Insert your BiBTeX file into your main file ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to insert into your main LaTeX:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliography{mybiblio}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose a specific style:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliographystyle{econometrica-fr}&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliography{mybiblio}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Bibliography_Management&amp;diff=359</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Bibliography Management</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Bibliography_Management&amp;diff=359"/>
				<updated>2011-06-01T08:20:05Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Insert your BiBTeX file into your main file */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embedded system ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are writing only one or two documents and aren't planning on writing more on the same subject for a long time, maybe you don't want to waste time creating a database of references you are never going to use. In this case you should consider using the basic and simple bibliography support that is embedded within LaTeX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LaTeX provides an environment called &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; that you have to use where you want the bibliography; that usually means at the very end of your document, just before the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\end{document}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. Here is a practical example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The \LaTeX system~\cite{lamport94} is set of macros for the \TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{9}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem{lamport94}&lt;br /&gt;
  Leslie Lamport,&lt;br /&gt;
  \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.&lt;br /&gt;
  Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,&lt;br /&gt;
  2nd Edition,&lt;br /&gt;
  1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will be displayed with numbered references:&lt;br /&gt;
The LaTeX system [1] is set of macros for the TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The \LaTeX system~\cite{lamport94} is a set of macros for the \TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{9}&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem[(Lamport 1994)]{lamport94}&lt;br /&gt;
  Leslie Lamport,&lt;br /&gt;
  \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.&lt;br /&gt;
  Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,&lt;br /&gt;
  2nd Edition,&lt;br /&gt;
  1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will be displayed using the optional argument of the bibitem action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OK, so what is going on here? The first thing to notice is the establishment of the environment. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a keyword that LaTeX recognizes as everything between the begin and end tags as being data for the bibliography. The optional argument, which I supplied after the begin statement, is telling LaTeX how wide the item label will be when printed. Note however, that it is not a literal parameter, i.e the number 9 in this case, but a text width. Therefore, I am effectively telling LaTeX that I will only need reference labels of one character in width, which means no more than nine references in total. If you want more than ten, then input a two-digit number, such as '99' which permits fewer than 100 references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next is the actual reference entry itself. This is prefixed with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem{''cite_key''}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The ''cite_key'' should be a unique identifier for that particular reference, and is often some sort of mnemonic consisting of any sequence of letters, numbers and punctuation symbols (although not a comma). I often use the surname of the first author, followed by the last two digits of the year (hence ''lamport94''). If that author has produced more than one reference for a given year, then I add letters after, 'a', 'b', etc. But, you should do whatever works for you. Everything after the key is the reference itself. You need to type it as you want it to be presented. I have put the different parts of the reference, such as author, title, etc., on different lines for readability. These linebreaks are ignored by LaTeX. I wanted the title to be in italics, so I used the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\emph{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command to achieve this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Citations ==&lt;br /&gt;
To actually cite a given document is very easy. Go to the point where you want the citation to appear, and use the following: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{''cite_key''}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, where the ''cite_key'' is that of the bibitem you wish to cite. When LaTeX processes the document, the citation will be cross-referenced with the bibitems and replaced with the appropriate number citation. The advantage here, once again, is that LaTeX looks after the numbering for you. If it were totally manual, then adding or removing a reference would be a real chore, as you would have to re-number all the citations by hand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of WYSIWYG editors, typesetting systems like \TeX{} or \LaTeX{} \cite{lamport94} can be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Referring More Specific ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you want to refer to a certain page, figure or theorem in a text book. For that you can use the arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cite[p.~215]{citation01}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The argument, &amp;quot;p. 215&amp;quot;, will show up inside the same brackets. Note the tilde in [p.~215], which replaces the end-of-sentence spacing with a non-breakable inter-word space. There are two reasons: end-of-sentence spacing is too wide, and &amp;quot;p.&amp;quot; should not be separated from the page number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multiple Citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a sequence of multiple citations are needed, you should use a single &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The citations are then separated by commas. Note that you must not use spaces between the citations. Here's an example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cite{citation01,citation02,citation03}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result will then be shown as citations inside the same brackets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No Cite ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you only want a reference to appear in the bibliography, but not where it is referenced in the main text, then the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nocite{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can be used, for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lamport showed in 1995 something...  \nocite{lamport95}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A special version of the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nocite{*}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, includes all entries from the database, whether they are referenced in the document or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== BiBTeX styles for reviews ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Economic reviews ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can access to some bibliographic styles specific to economic reviews at the URL&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/economic&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The README file should be read first. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the springer journals, you can access to the ''Instruction for authors'' at the following URL:&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.springer.com/cda/content/document/cda_downloaddocument/LaTeX.zip?SGWID=0-0-45-468198-0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Presentations|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using BiBTeX to create a bibliography ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put all your references into a separate file. Save it in .bib (as &amp;quot;mybiblio.bib&amp;quot; ) in the same folder than your main LaTeX file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
@article{Vikat2007,&lt;br /&gt;
	Author = {Solaz, A.},&lt;br /&gt;
	Doi = {10.4054/DemRes.2007.17.14},&lt;br /&gt;
	Journal = {Demographic Research},&lt;br /&gt;
	Number = {14},&lt;br /&gt;
	Pages = {389-440},&lt;br /&gt;
	Title = {Generation and Gender Survey (GGS): Towards a better understanding of relationships and processes in the life course},&lt;br /&gt;
	Volume = {17},&lt;br /&gt;
	Year = {2007},&lt;br /&gt;
	Bdsk-Url-1 = {http://dx.doi.org/10.4054/DemRes.2007.17.14}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
@article{Régnier-Loilier2006,&lt;br /&gt;
author = {Régnier-Loilier, A.},&lt;br /&gt;
title= {How often do adult children see their parents?},&lt;br /&gt;
year = {2006},&lt;br /&gt;
URL = {http://www.ined.fr/fichier/t_publication/1211/publi_pdf2_pop.and.soc.english.427.pdf},&lt;br /&gt;
journal = {Population &amp;amp; Societies},&lt;br /&gt;
volume = {427},&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Insert your BiBTeX file into your main file ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to insert:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliography{mybiblio}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose a specific style:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliographystyle{econometrica-fr}&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliography{mybiblio}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Bibliography_Management&amp;diff=358</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Bibliography Management</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Bibliography_Management&amp;diff=358"/>
				<updated>2011-06-01T08:18:59Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : BiBTeX file code&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embedded system ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are writing only one or two documents and aren't planning on writing more on the same subject for a long time, maybe you don't want to waste time creating a database of references you are never going to use. In this case you should consider using the basic and simple bibliography support that is embedded within LaTeX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LaTeX provides an environment called &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; that you have to use where you want the bibliography; that usually means at the very end of your document, just before the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\end{document}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. Here is a practical example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The \LaTeX system~\cite{lamport94} is set of macros for the \TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{9}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem{lamport94}&lt;br /&gt;
  Leslie Lamport,&lt;br /&gt;
  \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.&lt;br /&gt;
  Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,&lt;br /&gt;
  2nd Edition,&lt;br /&gt;
  1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will be displayed with numbered references:&lt;br /&gt;
The LaTeX system [1] is set of macros for the TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The \LaTeX system~\cite{lamport94} is a set of macros for the \TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{9}&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem[(Lamport 1994)]{lamport94}&lt;br /&gt;
  Leslie Lamport,&lt;br /&gt;
  \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.&lt;br /&gt;
  Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,&lt;br /&gt;
  2nd Edition,&lt;br /&gt;
  1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will be displayed using the optional argument of the bibitem action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OK, so what is going on here? The first thing to notice is the establishment of the environment. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a keyword that LaTeX recognizes as everything between the begin and end tags as being data for the bibliography. The optional argument, which I supplied after the begin statement, is telling LaTeX how wide the item label will be when printed. Note however, that it is not a literal parameter, i.e the number 9 in this case, but a text width. Therefore, I am effectively telling LaTeX that I will only need reference labels of one character in width, which means no more than nine references in total. If you want more than ten, then input a two-digit number, such as '99' which permits fewer than 100 references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next is the actual reference entry itself. This is prefixed with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem{''cite_key''}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The ''cite_key'' should be a unique identifier for that particular reference, and is often some sort of mnemonic consisting of any sequence of letters, numbers and punctuation symbols (although not a comma). I often use the surname of the first author, followed by the last two digits of the year (hence ''lamport94''). If that author has produced more than one reference for a given year, then I add letters after, 'a', 'b', etc. But, you should do whatever works for you. Everything after the key is the reference itself. You need to type it as you want it to be presented. I have put the different parts of the reference, such as author, title, etc., on different lines for readability. These linebreaks are ignored by LaTeX. I wanted the title to be in italics, so I used the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\emph{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command to achieve this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Citations ==&lt;br /&gt;
To actually cite a given document is very easy. Go to the point where you want the citation to appear, and use the following: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{''cite_key''}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, where the ''cite_key'' is that of the bibitem you wish to cite. When LaTeX processes the document, the citation will be cross-referenced with the bibitems and replaced with the appropriate number citation. The advantage here, once again, is that LaTeX looks after the numbering for you. If it were totally manual, then adding or removing a reference would be a real chore, as you would have to re-number all the citations by hand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of WYSIWYG editors, typesetting systems like \TeX{} or \LaTeX{} \cite{lamport94} can be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Referring More Specific ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you want to refer to a certain page, figure or theorem in a text book. For that you can use the arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cite[p.~215]{citation01}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The argument, &amp;quot;p. 215&amp;quot;, will show up inside the same brackets. Note the tilde in [p.~215], which replaces the end-of-sentence spacing with a non-breakable inter-word space. There are two reasons: end-of-sentence spacing is too wide, and &amp;quot;p.&amp;quot; should not be separated from the page number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multiple Citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a sequence of multiple citations are needed, you should use a single &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The citations are then separated by commas. Note that you must not use spaces between the citations. Here's an example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cite{citation01,citation02,citation03}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result will then be shown as citations inside the same brackets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No Cite ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you only want a reference to appear in the bibliography, but not where it is referenced in the main text, then the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nocite{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can be used, for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lamport showed in 1995 something...  \nocite{lamport95}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A special version of the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nocite{*}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, includes all entries from the database, whether they are referenced in the document or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== BiBTeX styles for reviews ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Economic reviews ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can access to some bibliographic styles specific to economic reviews at the URL&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/economic&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The README file should be read first. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the springer journals, you can access to the ''Instruction for authors'' at the following URL:&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.springer.com/cda/content/document/cda_downloaddocument/LaTeX.zip?SGWID=0-0-45-468198-0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Presentations|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using BiBTeX to create a bibliography ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put all your references into a separate file. Save it in .bib (as &amp;quot;mybiblio.bib&amp;quot; ) in the same folder than your main LaTeX file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
@article{Vikat2007,&lt;br /&gt;
	Author = {Solaz, A.},&lt;br /&gt;
	Doi = {10.4054/DemRes.2007.17.14},&lt;br /&gt;
	Journal = {Demographic Research},&lt;br /&gt;
	Number = {14},&lt;br /&gt;
	Pages = {389-440},&lt;br /&gt;
	Title = {Generation and Gender Survey (GGS): Towards a better understanding of relationships and processes in the life course},&lt;br /&gt;
	Volume = {17},&lt;br /&gt;
	Year = {2007},&lt;br /&gt;
	Bdsk-Url-1 = {http://dx.doi.org/10.4054/DemRes.2007.17.14}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
@article{Régnier-Loilier2006,&lt;br /&gt;
author = {Régnier-Loilier, A.},&lt;br /&gt;
title= {How often do adult children see their parents?},&lt;br /&gt;
year = {2006},&lt;br /&gt;
URL = {http://www.ined.fr/fichier/t_publication/1211/publi_pdf2_pop.and.soc.english.427.pdf},&lt;br /&gt;
journal = {Population &amp;amp; Societies},&lt;br /&gt;
volume = {427},&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Insert your BiBTeX file into your main file ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to insert:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliography{mybiblio}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose a specific style:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliographystyle{econometrica-fr}&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliography{mybiblio}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Bibliography_Management&amp;diff=357</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Bibliography Management</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Bibliography_Management&amp;diff=357"/>
				<updated>2011-06-01T08:17:37Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Using BiBTeX to create a bibliography */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embedded system ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are writing only one or two documents and aren't planning on writing more on the same subject for a long time, maybe you don't want to waste time creating a database of references you are never going to use. In this case you should consider using the basic and simple bibliography support that is embedded within LaTeX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LaTeX provides an environment called &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; that you have to use where you want the bibliography; that usually means at the very end of your document, just before the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\end{document}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. Here is a practical example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The \LaTeX system~\cite{lamport94} is set of macros for the \TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{9}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem{lamport94}&lt;br /&gt;
  Leslie Lamport,&lt;br /&gt;
  \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.&lt;br /&gt;
  Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,&lt;br /&gt;
  2nd Edition,&lt;br /&gt;
  1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will be displayed with numbered references:&lt;br /&gt;
The LaTeX system [1] is set of macros for the TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The \LaTeX system~\cite{lamport94} is a set of macros for the \TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{9}&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem[(Lamport 1994)]{lamport94}&lt;br /&gt;
  Leslie Lamport,&lt;br /&gt;
  \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.&lt;br /&gt;
  Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,&lt;br /&gt;
  2nd Edition,&lt;br /&gt;
  1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will be displayed using the optional argument of the bibitem action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OK, so what is going on here? The first thing to notice is the establishment of the environment. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a keyword that LaTeX recognizes as everything between the begin and end tags as being data for the bibliography. The optional argument, which I supplied after the begin statement, is telling LaTeX how wide the item label will be when printed. Note however, that it is not a literal parameter, i.e the number 9 in this case, but a text width. Therefore, I am effectively telling LaTeX that I will only need reference labels of one character in width, which means no more than nine references in total. If you want more than ten, then input a two-digit number, such as '99' which permits fewer than 100 references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next is the actual reference entry itself. This is prefixed with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem{''cite_key''}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The ''cite_key'' should be a unique identifier for that particular reference, and is often some sort of mnemonic consisting of any sequence of letters, numbers and punctuation symbols (although not a comma). I often use the surname of the first author, followed by the last two digits of the year (hence ''lamport94''). If that author has produced more than one reference for a given year, then I add letters after, 'a', 'b', etc. But, you should do whatever works for you. Everything after the key is the reference itself. You need to type it as you want it to be presented. I have put the different parts of the reference, such as author, title, etc., on different lines for readability. These linebreaks are ignored by LaTeX. I wanted the title to be in italics, so I used the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\emph{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command to achieve this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Citations ==&lt;br /&gt;
To actually cite a given document is very easy. Go to the point where you want the citation to appear, and use the following: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{''cite_key''}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, where the ''cite_key'' is that of the bibitem you wish to cite. When LaTeX processes the document, the citation will be cross-referenced with the bibitems and replaced with the appropriate number citation. The advantage here, once again, is that LaTeX looks after the numbering for you. If it were totally manual, then adding or removing a reference would be a real chore, as you would have to re-number all the citations by hand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of WYSIWYG editors, typesetting systems like \TeX{} or \LaTeX{} \cite{lamport94} can be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Referring More Specific ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you want to refer to a certain page, figure or theorem in a text book. For that you can use the arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cite[p.~215]{citation01}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The argument, &amp;quot;p. 215&amp;quot;, will show up inside the same brackets. Note the tilde in [p.~215], which replaces the end-of-sentence spacing with a non-breakable inter-word space. There are two reasons: end-of-sentence spacing is too wide, and &amp;quot;p.&amp;quot; should not be separated from the page number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multiple Citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a sequence of multiple citations are needed, you should use a single &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The citations are then separated by commas. Note that you must not use spaces between the citations. Here's an example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cite{citation01,citation02,citation03}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result will then be shown as citations inside the same brackets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No Cite ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you only want a reference to appear in the bibliography, but not where it is referenced in the main text, then the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nocite{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can be used, for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lamport showed in 1995 something...  \nocite{lamport95}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A special version of the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nocite{*}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, includes all entries from the database, whether they are referenced in the document or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== BiBTeX styles for reviews ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Economic reviews ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can access to some bibliographic styles specific to economic reviews at the URL&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/economic&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The README file should be read first. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the springer journals, you can access to the ''Instruction for authors'' at the following URL:&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.springer.com/cda/content/document/cda_downloaddocument/LaTeX.zip?SGWID=0-0-45-468198-0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Presentations|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using BiBTeX to create a bibliography ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put all your references into a separate file. Save it in .bib (as &amp;quot;mybiblio.bib&amp;quot; ) in the same folder than your main LaTeX file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
@article{Vikat2007,&lt;br /&gt;
	Author = {Solaz, A.},&lt;br /&gt;
	Doi = {10.4054/DemRes.2007.17.14},&lt;br /&gt;
	Journal = {Demographic Research},&lt;br /&gt;
	Number = {14},&lt;br /&gt;
	Pages = {389-440},&lt;br /&gt;
	Title = {Generation and Gender Survey (GGS): Towards a better understanding of relationships and processes in the life course},&lt;br /&gt;
	Volume = {17},&lt;br /&gt;
	Year = {2007},&lt;br /&gt;
	Bdsk-Url-1 = {http://dx.doi.org/10.4054/DemRes.2007.17.14}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
@article{Régnier-Loilier2006,&lt;br /&gt;
author = {Régnier-Loilier, A.},&lt;br /&gt;
title= {How often do adult children see their parents?},&lt;br /&gt;
year = {2006},&lt;br /&gt;
URL = {http://www.ined.fr/fichier/t_publication/1211/publi_pdf2_pop.and.soc.english.427.pdf},&lt;br /&gt;
journal = {Population &amp;amp; Societies},&lt;br /&gt;
volume = {427},&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Insert your BiBTeX file into your main file ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to insert:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliography{mybiblio}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose a specific style:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliographystyle{econometrica-fr}&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliography{mybiblio}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Bibliography_Management&amp;diff=356</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Bibliography Management</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Bibliography_Management&amp;diff=356"/>
				<updated>2011-06-01T08:16:12Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : BiBTeX file code&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embedded system ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are writing only one or two documents and aren't planning on writing more on the same subject for a long time, maybe you don't want to waste time creating a database of references you are never going to use. In this case you should consider using the basic and simple bibliography support that is embedded within LaTeX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LaTeX provides an environment called &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; that you have to use where you want the bibliography; that usually means at the very end of your document, just before the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\end{document}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. Here is a practical example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The \LaTeX system~\cite{lamport94} is set of macros for the \TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{9}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem{lamport94}&lt;br /&gt;
  Leslie Lamport,&lt;br /&gt;
  \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.&lt;br /&gt;
  Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,&lt;br /&gt;
  2nd Edition,&lt;br /&gt;
  1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will be displayed with numbered references:&lt;br /&gt;
The LaTeX system [1] is set of macros for the TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The \LaTeX system~\cite{lamport94} is a set of macros for the \TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{9}&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem[(Lamport 1994)]{lamport94}&lt;br /&gt;
  Leslie Lamport,&lt;br /&gt;
  \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.&lt;br /&gt;
  Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,&lt;br /&gt;
  2nd Edition,&lt;br /&gt;
  1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will be displayed using the optional argument of the bibitem action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OK, so what is going on here? The first thing to notice is the establishment of the environment. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a keyword that LaTeX recognizes as everything between the begin and end tags as being data for the bibliography. The optional argument, which I supplied after the begin statement, is telling LaTeX how wide the item label will be when printed. Note however, that it is not a literal parameter, i.e the number 9 in this case, but a text width. Therefore, I am effectively telling LaTeX that I will only need reference labels of one character in width, which means no more than nine references in total. If you want more than ten, then input a two-digit number, such as '99' which permits fewer than 100 references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next is the actual reference entry itself. This is prefixed with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem{''cite_key''}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The ''cite_key'' should be a unique identifier for that particular reference, and is often some sort of mnemonic consisting of any sequence of letters, numbers and punctuation symbols (although not a comma). I often use the surname of the first author, followed by the last two digits of the year (hence ''lamport94''). If that author has produced more than one reference for a given year, then I add letters after, 'a', 'b', etc. But, you should do whatever works for you. Everything after the key is the reference itself. You need to type it as you want it to be presented. I have put the different parts of the reference, such as author, title, etc., on different lines for readability. These linebreaks are ignored by LaTeX. I wanted the title to be in italics, so I used the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\emph{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command to achieve this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Citations ==&lt;br /&gt;
To actually cite a given document is very easy. Go to the point where you want the citation to appear, and use the following: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{''cite_key''}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, where the ''cite_key'' is that of the bibitem you wish to cite. When LaTeX processes the document, the citation will be cross-referenced with the bibitems and replaced with the appropriate number citation. The advantage here, once again, is that LaTeX looks after the numbering for you. If it were totally manual, then adding or removing a reference would be a real chore, as you would have to re-number all the citations by hand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of WYSIWYG editors, typesetting systems like \TeX{} or \LaTeX{} \cite{lamport94} can be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Referring More Specific ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you want to refer to a certain page, figure or theorem in a text book. For that you can use the arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cite[p.~215]{citation01}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The argument, &amp;quot;p. 215&amp;quot;, will show up inside the same brackets. Note the tilde in [p.~215], which replaces the end-of-sentence spacing with a non-breakable inter-word space. There are two reasons: end-of-sentence spacing is too wide, and &amp;quot;p.&amp;quot; should not be separated from the page number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multiple Citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a sequence of multiple citations are needed, you should use a single &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The citations are then separated by commas. Note that you must not use spaces between the citations. Here's an example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cite{citation01,citation02,citation03}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result will then be shown as citations inside the same brackets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No Cite ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you only want a reference to appear in the bibliography, but not where it is referenced in the main text, then the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nocite{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can be used, for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lamport showed in 1995 something...  \nocite{lamport95}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A special version of the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nocite{*}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, includes all entries from the database, whether they are referenced in the document or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== BiBTeX styles for reviews ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Economic reviews ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can access to some bibliographic styles specific to economic reviews at the URL&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/economic&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The README file should be read first. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the springer journals, you can access to the ''Instruction for authors'' at the following URL:&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.springer.com/cda/content/document/cda_downloaddocument/LaTeX.zip?SGWID=0-0-45-468198-0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Presentations|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using BiBTeX to create a bibliography ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put all your references into a separate file. Save it in .bib (as &amp;quot;mybiblio.bib&amp;quot; ) in the same folder than your main LaTeX file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
@article{Vikat2007,&lt;br /&gt;
	Author = {Solaz, A.},&lt;br /&gt;
	Doi = {10.4054/DemRes.2007.17.14},&lt;br /&gt;
	Journal = {Demographic Research},&lt;br /&gt;
	Number = {14},&lt;br /&gt;
	Pages = {389-440},&lt;br /&gt;
	Title = {Generation and Gender Survey (GGS): Towards a better understanding of relationships and processes in the life course},&lt;br /&gt;
	Volume = {17},&lt;br /&gt;
	Year = {2007},&lt;br /&gt;
	Bdsk-Url-1 = {http://dx.doi.org/10.4054/DemRes.2007.17.14}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
@article{Régnier-Loilier2006,&lt;br /&gt;
author = {Régnier-Loilier, A.},&lt;br /&gt;
title= {How often do adult children see their parents?},&lt;br /&gt;
year = {2006},&lt;br /&gt;
URL = {http://www.ined.fr/fichier/t_publication/1211/publi_pdf2_pop.and.soc.english.427.pdf},&lt;br /&gt;
journal = {Population &amp;amp; Societies},&lt;br /&gt;
volume = {427},&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Insert your BiBTeX file into your main file  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to insert:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliography{mybiblio}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose a specific style:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliographystyle{econometrica-fr}&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliography{mybiblio}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Bibliography_Management&amp;diff=355</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Bibliography Management</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Bibliography_Management&amp;diff=355"/>
				<updated>2011-06-01T07:54:20Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : BiBTeX file&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embedded system ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are writing only one or two documents and aren't planning on writing more on the same subject for a long time, maybe you don't want to waste time creating a database of references you are never going to use. In this case you should consider using the basic and simple bibliography support that is embedded within LaTeX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LaTeX provides an environment called &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; that you have to use where you want the bibliography; that usually means at the very end of your document, just before the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\end{document}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. Here is a practical example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The \LaTeX system~\cite{lamport94} is set of macros for the \TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{9}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem{lamport94}&lt;br /&gt;
  Leslie Lamport,&lt;br /&gt;
  \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.&lt;br /&gt;
  Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,&lt;br /&gt;
  2nd Edition,&lt;br /&gt;
  1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will be displayed with numbered references:&lt;br /&gt;
The LaTeX system [1] is set of macros for the TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The \LaTeX system~\cite{lamport94} is a set of macros for the \TeX engine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{9}&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem[(Lamport 1994)]{lamport94}&lt;br /&gt;
  Leslie Lamport,&lt;br /&gt;
  \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.&lt;br /&gt;
  Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,&lt;br /&gt;
  2nd Edition,&lt;br /&gt;
  1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will be displayed using the optional argument of the bibitem action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OK, so what is going on here? The first thing to notice is the establishment of the environment. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a keyword that LaTeX recognizes as everything between the begin and end tags as being data for the bibliography. The optional argument, which I supplied after the begin statement, is telling LaTeX how wide the item label will be when printed. Note however, that it is not a literal parameter, i.e the number 9 in this case, but a text width. Therefore, I am effectively telling LaTeX that I will only need reference labels of one character in width, which means no more than nine references in total. If you want more than ten, then input a two-digit number, such as '99' which permits fewer than 100 references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next is the actual reference entry itself. This is prefixed with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem{''cite_key''}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The ''cite_key'' should be a unique identifier for that particular reference, and is often some sort of mnemonic consisting of any sequence of letters, numbers and punctuation symbols (although not a comma). I often use the surname of the first author, followed by the last two digits of the year (hence ''lamport94''). If that author has produced more than one reference for a given year, then I add letters after, 'a', 'b', etc. But, you should do whatever works for you. Everything after the key is the reference itself. You need to type it as you want it to be presented. I have put the different parts of the reference, such as author, title, etc., on different lines for readability. These linebreaks are ignored by LaTeX. I wanted the title to be in italics, so I used the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\emph{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command to achieve this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Citations ==&lt;br /&gt;
To actually cite a given document is very easy. Go to the point where you want the citation to appear, and use the following: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{''cite_key''}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, where the ''cite_key'' is that of the bibitem you wish to cite. When LaTeX processes the document, the citation will be cross-referenced with the bibitems and replaced with the appropriate number citation. The advantage here, once again, is that LaTeX looks after the numbering for you. If it were totally manual, then adding or removing a reference would be a real chore, as you would have to re-number all the citations by hand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of WYSIWYG editors, typesetting systems like \TeX{} or \LaTeX{} \cite{lamport94} can be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Referring More Specific ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you want to refer to a certain page, figure or theorem in a text book. For that you can use the arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cite[p.~215]{citation01}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The argument, &amp;quot;p. 215&amp;quot;, will show up inside the same brackets. Note the tilde in [p.~215], which replaces the end-of-sentence spacing with a non-breakable inter-word space. There are two reasons: end-of-sentence spacing is too wide, and &amp;quot;p.&amp;quot; should not be separated from the page number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multiple Citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a sequence of multiple citations are needed, you should use a single &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. The citations are then separated by commas. Note that you must not use spaces between the citations. Here's an example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cite{citation01,citation02,citation03}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result will then be shown as citations inside the same brackets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No Cite ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you only want a reference to appear in the bibliography, but not where it is referenced in the main text, then the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nocite{}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can be used, for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; enclose=&amp;quot;none&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lamport showed in 1995 something...  \nocite{lamport95}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A special version of the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nocite{*}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, includes all entries from the database, whether they are referenced in the document or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== BiBTeX styles for reviews ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Economic reviews ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can access to some bibliographic styles specific to economic reviews at the URL&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/economic&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The README file should be read first. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the springer journals, you can access to the ''Instruction for authors'' at the following URL:&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.springer.com/cda/content/document/cda_downloaddocument/LaTeX.zip?SGWID=0-0-45-468198-0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Presentations|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Creating a BiBTeX file ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Insert ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliographystyle{econometrica-fr}&lt;br /&gt;
\bibliography{mybiblio}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=350</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=350"/>
				<updated>2011-05-31T10:13:49Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Tutorials */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with PDF output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link &amp;quot;Return to the title&amp;quot; is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{Link to the title} points to the frame labeled &amp;quot;titelabel&amp;quot;. A button can be created using \beamerbutton{}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A selection of theme and color theme combinations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Size problems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equations are sometimes to long to fit on one line. You can reduce their size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Default :&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}&lt;br /&gt;
Small:&lt;br /&gt;
{\small\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Footnotesize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\footnotesize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Scriptsize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\scriptsize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Tiny&lt;br /&gt;
{\tiny\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also change the font size of the whole document (by default 11pt, at the full screen mode this font size corresponds to 22 pt) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[8pt]{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=349</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=349"/>
				<updated>2011-05-31T10:00:17Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Tutorials */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with PDF output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link &amp;quot;Return to the title&amp;quot; is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{Link to the title} points to the frame labeled &amp;quot;titelabel&amp;quot;. A button can be created using \beamerbutton{}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A selection of theme and color theme combinations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Size problems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equations are sometimes to long to fit on one line. You can reduce their size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Default :&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}&lt;br /&gt;
Small:&lt;br /&gt;
{\small\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Footnotesize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\footnotesize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Scriptsize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\scriptsize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Tiny&lt;br /&gt;
{\tiny\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also change the font size of the whole document (by default 11pt, at the full screen mode this font size corresponds to 22 pt) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[8pt]{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Beamer tutorial [http:faq.ktug.or.kr/wiki/uploads/beamer_guide.pdf lien]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=348</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=348"/>
				<updated>2011-05-31T09:57:18Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Tutorials */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with PDF output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link &amp;quot;Return to the title&amp;quot; is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{Link to the title} points to the frame labeled &amp;quot;titelabel&amp;quot;. A button can be created using \beamerbutton{}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A selection of theme and color theme combinations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Size problems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equations are sometimes to long to fit on one line. You can reduce their size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Default :&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}&lt;br /&gt;
Small:&lt;br /&gt;
{\small\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Footnotesize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\footnotesize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Scriptsize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\scriptsize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Tiny&lt;br /&gt;
{\tiny\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also change the font size of the whole document (by default 11pt, at the full screen mode this font size corresponds to 22 pt) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[8pt]{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Beamer tutorial [http://www.example.com titre du lien]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=347</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=347"/>
				<updated>2011-05-31T09:55:21Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Tutorials */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with PDF output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link &amp;quot;Return to the title&amp;quot; is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{Link to the title} points to the frame labeled &amp;quot;titelabel&amp;quot;. A button can be created using \beamerbutton{}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A selection of theme and color theme combinations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Size problems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equations are sometimes to long to fit on one line. You can reduce their size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Default :&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}&lt;br /&gt;
Small:&lt;br /&gt;
{\small\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Footnotesize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\footnotesize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Scriptsize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\scriptsize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Tiny&lt;br /&gt;
{\tiny\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also change the font size of the whole document (by default 11pt, at the full screen mode this font size corresponds to 22 pt) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[8pt]{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Beamer tutorial [http://www.faq.ktug.or.kr/wiki/uploads/beamer_guide.pdf]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=346</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=346"/>
				<updated>2011-05-31T09:54:41Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Tutorials */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with PDF output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link &amp;quot;Return to the title&amp;quot; is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{Link to the title} points to the frame labeled &amp;quot;titelabel&amp;quot;. A button can be created using \beamerbutton{}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A selection of theme and color theme combinations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Size problems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equations are sometimes to long to fit on one line. You can reduce their size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Default :&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}&lt;br /&gt;
Small:&lt;br /&gt;
{\small\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Footnotesize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\footnotesize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Scriptsize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\scriptsize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Tiny&lt;br /&gt;
{\tiny\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also change the font size of the whole document (by default 11pt, at the full screen mode this font size corresponds to 22 pt) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[8pt]{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Beamer tutorial [faq.ktug.or.kr/wiki/uploads/beamer_guide.pdf]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=345</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=345"/>
				<updated>2011-05-31T09:51:46Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Tutorials */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with PDF output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link &amp;quot;Return to the title&amp;quot; is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{Link to the title} points to the frame labeled &amp;quot;titelabel&amp;quot;. A button can be created using \beamerbutton{}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A selection of theme and color theme combinations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Size problems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equations are sometimes to long to fit on one line. You can reduce their size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Default :&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}&lt;br /&gt;
Small:&lt;br /&gt;
{\small\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Footnotesize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\footnotesize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Scriptsize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\scriptsize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Tiny&lt;br /&gt;
{\tiny\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also change the font size of the whole document (by default 11pt, at the full screen mode this font size corresponds to 22 pt) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[8pt]{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Beamer tutorial &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
faq.ktug.or.kr/wiki/uploads/beamer_guide.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=344</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=344"/>
				<updated>2011-05-31T09:48:13Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with PDF output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link &amp;quot;Return to the title&amp;quot; is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{Link to the title} points to the frame labeled &amp;quot;titelabel&amp;quot;. A button can be created using \beamerbutton{}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A selection of theme and color theme combinations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Size problems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equations are sometimes to long to fit on one line. You can reduce their size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Default :&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}&lt;br /&gt;
Small:&lt;br /&gt;
{\small\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Footnotesize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\footnotesize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Scriptsize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\scriptsize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Tiny&lt;br /&gt;
{\tiny\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also change the font size of the whole document (by default 11pt, at the full screen mode this font size corresponds to 22 pt) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[8pt]{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=343</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=343"/>
				<updated>2011-05-31T09:47:48Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Size problems */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with PDF output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link &amp;quot;Return to the title&amp;quot; is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{Link to the title} points to the frame labeled &amp;quot;titelabel&amp;quot;. A button can be created using \beamerbutton{}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A selection of theme and color theme combinations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Size problems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equations are sometimes to long to fit on one line. You can reduce their size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Default :&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}&lt;br /&gt;
Small:&lt;br /&gt;
{\small\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Footnotesize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\footnotesize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Scriptsize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\scriptsize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Tiny&lt;br /&gt;
{\tiny\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also change the font size of the whole document (by default 11pt, at the full screen mode this font size corresponds to 22 pt) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[8pt]{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=341</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=341"/>
				<updated>2011-05-31T09:42:14Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with PDF output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link &amp;quot;Return to the title&amp;quot; is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{Link to the title} points to the frame labeled &amp;quot;titelabel&amp;quot;. A button can be created using \beamerbutton{}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A selection of theme and color theme combinations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Size problems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equations are sometimes to long to fit on one line. You can reduce their size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Default :&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}&lt;br /&gt;
Small:&lt;br /&gt;
{\small\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Footnotesize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\footnotesize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Scriptsize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\scriptsize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Tiny&lt;br /&gt;
{\tiny\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also change the font size of the whole document (by default 11pt) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[8pt]{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=340</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=340"/>
				<updated>2011-05-31T09:40:55Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with PDF output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link &amp;quot;Return to the title&amp;quot; is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{Link to the title} points to the frame labeled &amp;quot;titelabel&amp;quot;. A button can be created using \beamerbutton{}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A selection of theme and color theme combinations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Size problems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equations are sometimes to long to fit on one line. You can reduce their size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Default :&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}&lt;br /&gt;
Small:&lt;br /&gt;
{\small\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Footnotesize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\footnotesize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Scriptsize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\scriptsize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Tiny&lt;br /&gt;
{\tiny\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also change the font size of the whole document (by default 11pt) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[8pt]{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=339</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=339"/>
				<updated>2011-05-31T09:40:18Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* FAQ */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with PDF output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link &amp;quot;Return to the title&amp;quot; is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{Link to the title} points to the frame labeled &amp;quot;titelabel&amp;quot;. A button can be created using \beamerbutton{}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A selection of theme and color theme combinations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Size problems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equations are sometimes to long to fit on one line. You can reduce their size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Default :&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}&lt;br /&gt;
Small:&lt;br /&gt;
{\small\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Footnotesize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\footnotesize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Scriptsize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\scriptsize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Tiny&lt;br /&gt;
{\tiny\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also change the font size of the whole document (by default 11pt) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[8pt]{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=338</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=338"/>
				<updated>2011-05-31T09:30:52Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with PDF output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link &amp;quot;Return to the title&amp;quot; is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{Link to the title} points to the frame labeled &amp;quot;titelabel&amp;quot;. A button can be created using \beamerbutton{}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A selection of theme and color theme combinations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Size problems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equations are sometimes to long to fit on one line. You can reduce their size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Default :&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}&lt;br /&gt;
Small:&lt;br /&gt;
{\small\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Footnotesize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\footnotesize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Scriptsize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\scriptsize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Tiny&lt;br /&gt;
{\tiny\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=337</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=337"/>
				<updated>2011-05-31T09:30:22Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* FAQ */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with PDF output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link &amp;quot;Return to the title&amp;quot; is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{Link to the title} points to the frame labeled &amp;quot;titelabel&amp;quot;. A button can be created using \beamerbutton{}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A selection of theme and color theme combinations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Size problems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equations are sometimes to long to fit on one line. You can reduce their size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Default :&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}&lt;br /&gt;
Small:&lt;br /&gt;
{\small\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Footnotesize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\footnotesize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Scriptsize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\scriptsize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Tiny&lt;br /&gt;
{\tiny\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=336</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=336"/>
				<updated>2011-05-31T09:29:27Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with PDF output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link &amp;quot;Return to the title&amp;quot; is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{Link to the title} points to the frame labeled &amp;quot;titelabel&amp;quot;. A button can be created using \beamerbutton{}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A selection of theme and color theme combinations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Size problems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equation are sometimes to long to fit on one line. You can reduce its size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Default :&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}&lt;br /&gt;
Small:&lt;br /&gt;
{\small\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Footnotesize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\footnotesize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Scriptsize:&lt;br /&gt;
{\scriptsize\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
Tiny&lt;br /&gt;
{\tiny\begin{equation} A = B + C + D + F + G + H + I + J + K + L + M + N + O + P + Q + R + S + T + U + V \end{equation}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=324</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=324"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T18:03:24Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with PDF output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link &amp;quot;Return to the title&amp;quot; is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{Link to the title} points to the frame labeled &amp;quot;titelabel&amp;quot;. A button can be created using \beamerbutton{}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A selection of theme and color theme combinations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=323</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=323"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T18:02:52Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Beamer Theme Matrix */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link &amp;quot;Return to the title&amp;quot; is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{Link to the title} points to the frame labeled &amp;quot;titelabel&amp;quot;. A button can be created using \beamerbutton{}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A selection of theme and color theme combinations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=322</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=322"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T17:59:21Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Few more things about Beamer */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link &amp;quot;Return to the title&amp;quot; is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{Link to the title} points to the frame labeled &amp;quot;titelabel&amp;quot;. A button can be created using \beamerbutton{}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=321</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=321"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T17:58:52Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Hyperlink */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link &amp;quot;Return to the title&amp;quot; is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{Link to the title} points to the frame labeled &amp;quot;titelabel&amp;quot;. A button can be created using \beamerbutton{}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=320</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=320"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T17:51:58Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : hyperlink&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hyperlink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use hyperlinks in your Beamer presentation to go back to a previous slide or to skip slides.&lt;br /&gt;
You should define a label pointing on the frame (\label{titelabel}). On the frame where the link is created,   &lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{}. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section[short]{long}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\label{titelabel}                                           % label&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\hyperlink{titelabel}{\beamerbutton{Return to the title}}    % hyperlink&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=319</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=319"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T17:15:11Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Few more things about Beamer */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=318</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=318"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T17:14:32Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Importing graphics */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=317</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=317"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T17:14:06Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Few more things about Beamer */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=316</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=316"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T17:12:49Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Few more things about Beamer */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=315</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=315"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T17:11:51Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Logo */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=314</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=314"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T17:09:45Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Titles */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example Ined: [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=313</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=313"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T17:09:07Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Logo */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example Ined: [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}         % logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=Fichier:Logoined.jpg&amp;diff=312</id>
		<title>Fichier:Logoined.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=Fichier:Logoined.jpg&amp;diff=312"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T17:07:26Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=311</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=311"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T17:07:10Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Logo */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution (for example Ined: [[Fichier:logoined.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Logo Ined]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=310</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=310"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T17:05:55Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Titles */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add the logo of your institution using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\logo{\includegraphics[height=10mm]{logoined.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf&amp;diff=309</id>
		<title>Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf&amp;diff=309"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T16:49:18Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=Fichier:UserGuide.pdf&amp;diff=308</id>
		<title>Fichier:UserGuide.pdf</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=Fichier:UserGuide.pdf&amp;diff=308"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T16:48:48Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=307</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=307"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T16:48:26Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Tutorials */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:TutorialFR.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Tutorial FR]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=305</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=305"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T16:43:03Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* User Guide [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Tutorial (French) [[Fichier:UserGuide.pdf|200px|thumb|right|User Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=304</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=304"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T16:40:54Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Beamer themes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=303</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=303"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T16:40:17Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Darmstadt */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The slide position is given by a series of points:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=302</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=302"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T16:30:45Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Goettingen */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=301</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=301"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T16:30:15Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Goettingen */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Goettingen theme, the sidebar is on the right side.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=Fichier:Goettingen.pdf&amp;diff=300</id>
		<title>Fichier:Goettingen.pdf</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=Fichier:Goettingen.pdf&amp;diff=300"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T16:25:59Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=299</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=299"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T16:25:12Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Beamer themes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goettingen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Goettingen}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Goettingen.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Goettingen theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=297</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=297"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T16:17:00Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : space&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=296</id>
		<title>LaTeX/Presentations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://mse.ined.fr/LaTeX/w/index.php?title=LaTeX/Presentations&amp;diff=296"/>
				<updated>2011-05-30T16:16:15Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Matthieu Solignac : /* Beamer themes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{LaTeX/Top}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Beamer''' is a [[LaTeX]] class for creating slides for presentations. The name is taken from the German word Beamer, a pseudo-anglicism for video projector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has special syntax for defining 'slides' known in Beamer as 'frames'. Slides can be built up on-screen in stages as if by revealing text that was previously hidden or covered. This is handled with [[PDF]] output by creating successive pages that preserve the layout but add new elements, so that advancing to the next page in the PDF file appears to add something to the displayed page, when in fact it has redrawn the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer provides the ability to make 'handouts', that is a version of the output suitable for printing, without the dynamic features, so that the printed version of a slide shows the final version that will appear during the presentation. For actually putting more than one frame on the paper, pgfpages package is to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An &amp;quot;article&amp;quot; version is also available, rendered on standard sized paper (like A4 or letter), with frame titles used as paragraph titles, no special slide layout/colors, keeping the sectioning. This version is suitable for lecture notes or for having a single source file for an article and the slides for the talk about this article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=All you need to know about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==First example==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's start with a simple 3 slides presentation including one for the title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Step by step==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like any other LaTeX structured documents, the TeX code of a Beamer presentation starts with the Document Class Declaration: &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer} &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and it is enclosed between:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only new thing only new thing with Beamer is that each slide is enclosed between the two commands which identify the beginning and end of the slide:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add some package just after the Document Class Declaration. Once you know TeX general commands, it is very easy to make a Beamer presentation. So if you read carefully the previous sections, you just need to adapt this Beamer example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer is very flexible and allow you to do almost everything (except coffee...). In this section, we only present very general commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Few more things about Beamer=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We already used this example (See [[LaTeX/Structured document and document structure#LaTeX Document structure/Top Matter | Structure]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}  % For a Beamer presentation&lt;br /&gt;
\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
% Article information &lt;br /&gt;
\title[Complete-simple distributive lattices]&lt;br /&gt;
{A construction of complete-simple\\ distributive lattices}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
% Author information &lt;br /&gt;
\author{&lt;br /&gt;
  George~A. Menuhin   &lt;br /&gt;
   \thanks{  \texttt{gmen@ccw.uwinnebago.edu} &lt;br /&gt;
     Computer Science Department,&lt;br /&gt;
     University of Winnebago, Winnebago, MN 53714. &lt;br /&gt;
    The research was supported by the NSF under grant number 23466.}&lt;br /&gt;
and &lt;br /&gt;
   Ernest~T. Moynahan &lt;br /&gt;
    \thanks{\texttt{h1175moy\%ella@relay.eu.net}&lt;br /&gt;
       Mathematical Research Institute &lt;br /&gt;
       of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences,&lt;br /&gt;
       Budapest, P.O.B. 127, H-1364,&lt;br /&gt;
       Hungary. The research  was supported by the Hungarian National Foundation &lt;br /&gt;
       for Scientific Research, under Grant No. 9901.}&lt;br /&gt;
} &lt;br /&gt;
\date{\today}&lt;br /&gt;
\maketitle &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Slide title ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command to give a slide a title is: \frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{mytitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the usual sectioning commands and get the table of contents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get: [[Image:structurexample.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing graphics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LaTeX/Importing Graphics | previous sections]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlays ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of your slides can appairs incrementally. Elements of a slide can be temporarily hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pause === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place the \pause command between the part of the slide you want to show up separately. &lt;br /&gt;
\pause create multiple separate slides. The first slide displays the information contained above&lt;br /&gt;
the first \pause, the second slide displays the information down to the second \pause, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Question:} What do demographers do?\\&lt;br /&gt;
\pause  % command pause&lt;br /&gt;
\item \textbf{Answer:} Demographers study populations to determine &lt;br /&gt;
their size and composition and to predict how they are likely to &lt;br /&gt;
change in years to come. In all countries, this knowledge is key &lt;br /&gt;
to meeting the population's present and future needs, for example, &lt;br /&gt;
to decide how many new kindergartens, schools or retirement homes &lt;br /&gt;
are needed. Demographers analyse data collected by the national &lt;br /&gt;
statistical offices (INSEE in France) and organize surveys on &lt;br /&gt;
specific themes. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line command === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlays specifications are given in pointed brakets (&amp;lt; &amp;gt;) and indicate which slide the corresponding information should appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 on&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;1-3&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display from slide 1 to slide 3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;-2,4-5,7-&amp;gt; means &amp;quot;display on all slides except slides 3 and 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2&amp;gt; First line &lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;2-3&amp;gt; Second line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;1,3,5&amp;gt; Third line&lt;br /&gt;
\item&amp;lt;-2,4-5&amp;gt; Forth line&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Word command ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commands \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{} and \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{} allow you to only show some elements on a line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{text1}: text1 only appear on slide 1&lt;br /&gt;
* \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{text2}: text2 only appear on slide 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Quand \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{je mets \`a vos pieds un  \'eternel hommage}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Voulez\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{-vous qu'un instant je change de visage ?}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{avez captur\'e les sentiments d'un cour}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Que \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{pour vous adorer forma le Cr\'eateur.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Je \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{vous ch\'eris, amour, et ma plume en d\'elire}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Couche \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{sur le papier ce que je n'ose dire.}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Avec \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{soin, de mes vers lisez les premiers mots}&lt;br /&gt;
\item Vous \only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{saurez quel rem\`ede apporter \`a mes maux.}&lt;br /&gt;
\only&amp;lt;1&amp;gt;{\item Bien \`a vous, Eric Jarrigeon}\\&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \uncover&amp;lt;2&amp;gt;{\textit{Lettre d'Alfred de Musset \`a George Sand}}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hidden parts in grey ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, hidden parts are invisible. It is possible to get them in grey using&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercovered{transparent}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Color ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beamer colors can be changed using \setbeamercolor{}. You can choose a foreground (fg) color and a background (bg) color. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=red,bg=blue}: background in blue, text in red&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may prefer to choose your own slide template background. You just need to import your images (here called &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot; [[Fichier:insee.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Background image &amp;quot;insee&amp;quot;]]) using:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get slides like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=yellow}&lt;br /&gt;
\pgfdeclareimage[height=96mm,width=128mm]{name}{insee}&lt;br /&gt;
\setbeamertemplate{background}{\pgfuseimage{name}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
France's National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies &lt;br /&gt;
(Institut National de la Statistique et des Études Économiques: INSEE) &lt;br /&gt;
is a Directorate General of the Ministry of the Economy, Finance, and Industry. &lt;br /&gt;
It is therefore a government agency whose personnel are government employees, although &lt;br /&gt;
not all belong to the civil service. INSEE operates under government accounting rules: &lt;br /&gt;
it receives its funding from the State's general budget. &lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Beamer themes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your how beamer template defining color and style of every element. It is also possible to use existing beamer theme: you just need to add one line to enjoy well-known Beamer presentation templates (two if you want to change the colors).&lt;br /&gt;
* \usetheme{ } to choose the built-in theme. It is often named after cities (e.g. Warsaw, Darmstadt...)&lt;br /&gt;
* \usecolortheme{ } to choose the color theme. It is often named after animals (e.g. Beaver, Seahorse...). You can keep the default color theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, we apply the different themes on this [[LaTeX/Presentations#Sectioning Commands and Table of Contents | example]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}              % slide with the table of contents &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         % section&lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    % subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warsaw ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with default color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You just need to add the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            %Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsaw.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Warsaw Theme (with Dolphin color theme) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use another color theme like &amp;quot;dolphin&amp;quot; using the command \usecolortheme{dolphin}: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass{beamer}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Warsaw}            &lt;br /&gt;
\usecolortheme{dolphin}    %Color Theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{Demography}&lt;br /&gt;
\author{I. Ned}\institute{Institut National d'Etudes D\'emographiques}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\titlepage&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}               &lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{Outline}&lt;br /&gt;
\tableofcontents&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section1}         &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.1}    &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section first subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\subsection{section1.2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the first content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{itemize}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located on the second content slide of the first section second subsection&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item A&lt;br /&gt;
\item B&lt;br /&gt;
\item C&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\section{section2}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the first content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{block}{Normal bloc} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{block}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{alertblock}{Alert block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text&lt;br /&gt;
\end{alertblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{exampleblock}{Example block} &lt;br /&gt;
Text &lt;br /&gt;
\end{exampleblock}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
\frametitle{SlideTitle}&lt;br /&gt;
Text located in the second content slide of the second section&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frame}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\end{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:warsawdolphin.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Warsaw dolphin theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Darmstadt ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\usetheme{Darmstadt}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Darmstadt.pdf|200px|thumb|right|Darmstadt theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Beamer Theme Matrix ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/ Beamer Theme Matrix]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tutorials ==&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{LaTeX/Bottom|Structured document and document structure|Bibliography Management|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Matthieu Solignac</name></author>	</entry>

	</feed>